Canon | PIXMA MP810 | Quick Start Guide | Canon PIXMA MP810 Quick start guide

Canon PIXMA MP810 Quick start guide
FRANÇAIS ENGLISH
ČESKY
XXXXXXXX
©CANON INC.2006
PRINTED IN THAILAND
E14
QT5-0793-V01
TÜRKÇE
SLOVENSKY SLOVENŠČINA РУССКИЙ
POLSKI
MAGYAR LIETUVIŠKAI LATVIEŠU
EESTI
QT5-0793-V01
УКРАЇНСЬКА
.‫ﺧﺮﻃﻴﺶ ﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬ ﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
Quick Start Guide
The following ink tanks are compatible with this product.
Les réservoirs d'encre suivants sont compatibles avec ce produit.
S tímto produktem jsou kompatibilní následující inkoustové nádržky.
Selle seadmega ühilduvad järgmised tindimahutid.
Ar ierīci ir saderīgas šādas tintes tvertnes.
Šiam įrenginiui tinka toliau nurodytos rašalo talpyklos.
Az alábbi típusú tintatartályok használhatók a termékkel
Z urządzeniem są zgodne niżej wymienione zbiorniki z atramentem.
С этим принтером совместимы следующие чернильницы.
S tem izdelkom so združljivi naslednji črnilni vložki.
S týmto produktom sú kompatibilné nasledujúce kazety s atramentom.
Aşağıdaki mürekkep hazneleri bu ürünle uyumludur.
З цим пристроєм сумісні такі типи чорнильниць.
Quick Start Guide
Guide de démarrage rapide
Stručná příručka
Kiirstardi juhend
Darba uzsākšanas rokasgrāmata
Greito parengimo instrukcija
Beüzemelési útmutató
Szybkie wprowadzenie
Краткое руководство по началу работы
Kratka navodila za postavitev in uporabo
Stručná príručka
Hızlı Kurulum Kılavuzu
Коротка інструкція з користування
Regulatory Information
FCC Notice (U.S.A. Only)
For 120V, 60Hz model
Model Number: K10289
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
„
„
„
„
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of a shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If
such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Plaza
Lake Success, NY 11042
1-516-328-5600
Users in Canada
Caution
z This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
z Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur
du Canada.
Customer Technical Supports
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support* options:
„ For interactive troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers to frequently asked questions (www.canon.ca)
„ Automated interactive telephone support on most current products 24 hours, 7 days a week (1-800-OKCANON)
„ Free live technical support Mon - Fri 9am-8pm EST (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty (1-800-OK-CANON)
„ The location of the authorized service facility nearest you (1-800-OK-CANON) If the problem cannot be
corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of
your call to the Free live technical support number above or via the website at www.canon.ca
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.
z CANON CANADA INC.
1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
24 HOURS A DAY, SEVEN DAYS A WEEK
http://www.canon.ca
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﻀﺎ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ]‪) [POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )ﺃ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء )ﺏ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ )ﺝ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺝ(‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ )ﺃ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﺦ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﺏ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ )ﺃ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ]‪) [Ink‬ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ( )ﺃ( ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﻀﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ )ﺃ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫>‪) <Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Color hue‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Effects‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <PictBridge Settings‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <Settings‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Device settings‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<PictBridge settings‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Next‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٩‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ )‪ (٥‬ﻭ)‪ (٦‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<OK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫>‪<Page size‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫>‪<Media type‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫>‪<Print quality‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫>‪<Bordered/Borderless‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻼ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Photo opt.pro‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Photo Optimizer PRO‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Vivid photo‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Vivid Photo‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫>‪<Face brightener‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪ <Face brightener‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Image optimizer‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪ <Image optimizer‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Red eye correc.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <PictBridge settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Trimming‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Photo Stickers‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺻﻖ[ )‪ ،(PS-101‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ N/N-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ١٦/16-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[؛ ]‪ ٢/2-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[ ﻭ]‪٤/4-up‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[ ﻭ]‪ ٩/9-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪ ١٦/16-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ]‪ ١٦/16-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ]‪ ١٦/16-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Photo Stickers‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺻﻖ[ )‪ ،(PS-101‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪/Borderless‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Image optimize‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪/Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <PictBridge settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [VIVID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[NR‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ( ﺃﻭ ]‪/Face‬ﻭﺟﻪ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Red eye‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [VIVID‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [NR‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪/Face‬ﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪/Red eye‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.<Off‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫])‪/Shooting Info (Exif Data‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪[(Exif‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (Exif Print‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪."i‬‬
‫])‪/35 mm Film Style Layout (Contact Printing Layout‬ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ )ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺳﺔ([‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫– ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫– ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪/Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ >‪ <Page size‬ﻭ>‪ <Media type‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <PictBridge settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪/Paper size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﻭ]‪/Paper type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫]”‪/10 x 15 cm/4” x 6‬‬
‫‪ ١٥ × ١٠‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٦ x ٤/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Fast Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Pro‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Glossy Photo Paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫]”‪/Glossy Photo Paper “Everyday Use‬ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ "ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ"[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Stickers‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫*‪٥* ،١‬‬
‫ﻻﺻﻖ[‬
‫]”‪/13 x 18 cm/5” x 7‬‬
‫‪ ١٨ × ١٣‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٧ × ٥/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[‬
‫]‪[A4‬‬
‫])‪/8.5” x 11” (Letter‬‬
‫*‪٤* ,٣‬‬
‫‪ ١١ × ٨٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[‬
‫]‪/5.4 x 8.6 cm/Credit card‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٦ x ٥٫٤‬ﺳﻢ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ[‬
‫]”‪/20 x 25 cm/8” x 10‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥ × ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ‪ ١٠ × ٨/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫]‪/Fast Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Pro‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Glossy Photo Paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]”‪/Glossy Photo Paper “Everyday Use‬ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ "ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ"[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Fast Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Pro‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Glossy Photo Paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Glossy Photo Paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Fast Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Pro‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ[‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫]”‪/10.1 x 18 cm/4” x 7.1‬‬
‫‪ ١٨ × ١٠٫١‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٧٫١ × ٤/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٤* ,٣‬‬
‫‪*١‬‬
‫]‪/Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Plus Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻻﻣﻊ[‬
‫]‪/Fast Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ[‬
‫]‪/Photo Paper Pro‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ[‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺼﺮﻳًﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/sticker paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﻻﺻﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]"‪/10 x 15 cm/4" x 6‬‬
‫‪ ١٥ x ١٠‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٦ × ٤/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ]‪/Paper size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/Plain Paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪/Paper type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Paper size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫>‪ <A4‬ﺃﻭ ])‪ ١١ × ٨٫٥/8.5" x 11" (Letter‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ .[(Letter‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Paper type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪/Plain Paper‬ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<Borderless‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ]‪ ٤/4-up‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪/Paper size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ <A4‬ﺃﻭ ])‪/8.5" x 11" (Letter‬‬
‫‪ ١١ × ٨٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪.[(Letter‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺧﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﻊ[ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٠ × ٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٠,٢٥٤ × ٢,٢٠٣/‬ﻣﻢ )‪ ،(SG-201‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]"‪ ٢٥ x ٢٠/20 x 25 cm/8" x 10‬ﺳﻢ‪ ١٠ × ٨/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪/Paper size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﻭ]‪/Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ]‪/Paper type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫* ﺣﺪﺩ >‪) <Photo Plus Glossy‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﻻﻣﻊ( ﻓﻲ >‪ <Media type‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪<PictBridge‬‬
‫>‪ settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫■‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪/Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <PictBridge settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪ <PictBridge settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪<Print Setting‬‬
‫]‪/Paper size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪:‬‬
‫>‪) <Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪:<PictBridge settings‬‬
‫>‪ <Page size‬ﻭ>‪ <Media type‬ﻭ>‪<Bordered/Borderless‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٠‬‬
‫]‪/Paper type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪:‬‬
‫>‪) <Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫]‪/Layout‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ[‪:‬‬
‫>‪) <Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫]‪/Image optimize‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪) <Default> :‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪:<PictBridge settings‬‬
‫>‪ <Photo opt.pro‬ﻭ>‪ <Vivid photo‬ﻭ>‪<Face brightener‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <Noise reduction‬ﻭ>‪ <Image optimizer‬ﻭ>‪<Red eye‬‬
‫>‪ correc.‬ﻭ>‪ <Brightness‬ﻭ>‪ <Contrast‬ﻭ>‪<Color hue‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪<Effects‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ* ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ®‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.PNG‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪Exif2.21‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪ً.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ* ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪."PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Bluetooth BU-20‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻂ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ MP‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[OK‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ <Easy photo reprint‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‪) [Black‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ( ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫>‪<Sticker Print‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Photo Stickers‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ[ ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Print all photos‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫>‪<Change display‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Trimming‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ( ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﻠﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢١‬ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ >‪.<Print‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Select and print‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Next‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Easy-Scroll Wheel‬ﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]► ﺃﻭ ◄[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ )‪ (١‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺤﻪ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ( ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Я‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ( ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ( ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <Easy photo reprint‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٦×٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٤.١٥٢×٠٦.١٠١‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٧×٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٨.١٧٧×١٢٧/‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٠.٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ٠.٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٠.٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٠.٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ١٠/‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٠.٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٠.٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ١٠/‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ >‪.<Film print‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Letter‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <Photo index sheet‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Index sheet print‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫>‪.<Photo Index Sheet‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Scan sheet and print‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫>‪<Layout Print‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻠﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Sticker Print‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/Photo Stickers‬ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ[ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫>‪<DPOF print‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Captured info print‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ (Exif‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Photo index print‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Print all photos‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫>‪<Change display‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Trimming‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Search‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻻ ﻏﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ]‪) [Access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻣﻀﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <Memory card‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ >‪.<Print‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Select and print‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<Next‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Easy-Scroll Wheel‬ﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ W‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ )‪ (١‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(CF) Compact Flash‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Microdrive‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪*xD-Picture‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫‪SmartMedia z‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫‪MEMORY STICK z‬‬
‫‪MEMORY STICK PRO z‬‬
‫‪*MEMORY STICK Duo z‬‬
‫‪*MEMORY STICK PRO Duo z‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD Secure Digital‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪*MiniSD‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(v.3.31) MultiMedia‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫* ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ]‪) [Access‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <Copy‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‪) [Black‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ( ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫>‪) <Reduced/Enlarged Copy‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Two-sided copy‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Borderless copy‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<2-on-1 copy‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<4-on-1 copy‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Image repeat‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫>‪ <Auto layout‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ bitmaps‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ .PDF‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) OCR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ( ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫■‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪MP Navigator‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،MP Navigator‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،MP Navigator‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ]‪/Scanning Guide‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <Scan‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Black‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ]‪/Scanning Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ TWAIN‬ﺃﻭ ‪) WIA‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Windows XP‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺛﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ]‪/Scanning Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Page Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/File‬ﻣﻠﻒ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [MP810‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ]‪/Format for‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ]‪/Paper Size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/File‬ﻣﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Quality & Media‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/Paper Feed Switch‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪/Paper Source‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ]‪/Printer Driver Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ]‪/Printer Driver Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/File‬ﻣﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ]‪/Canon MP810 Printer‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ [Canon MP810‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫]‪/Preferences‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ[ )ﺃﻭ ]‪/Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ[(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪.[OK‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/Paper Feed Switch‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪/Paper Source‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Help‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Instructions‬ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ]‪/Printer Driver Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ )ﺃﻭ ]‪.([OK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫>‪:<Settings‬‬
‫>‪:<Easy photo reprint‬‬
‫>‪:<Film print‬‬
‫>‪:<Memory card‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ" ﺃﻭ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ" ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫"ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺃ( ﺯﺭ ]‪) [NAVI‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ(‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺯﺭﺍ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪) [NAVI‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺯﺭﺍ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ( ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺯﺭﻱ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫)ﺃ( ﺯﺭ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ])‪) [(f1‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ :(f1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ]))‪) [f1‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪/(f1‬‬
‫>‪ <Remaining ink vol‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺯﺭﺍ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ]))‪) [f2‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ :(f2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( ]‪[f2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ <Introduction>/(f2‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺃ( ﺯﺭ ]‪) [HOME‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫)ﺏ( ]‪) [Easy-Scroll Wheel‬ﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ(‬
‫)ﺝ( ﺯﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫)ﺝ(‬
‫■‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫]‪) [Easy-Scroll Wheel‬ﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪) [Easy-Scroll Wheel‬ﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ W‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [HOME‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [HOME‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪) [Easy-Scroll Wheel‬ﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪.<Memory card‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ( )]‪) [f2‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ ،(<Introduction>/f2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦‬‬
‫>‪:<Copy‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫>‪:<Scan‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥‬‬
‫>‪ :<Photo index sheet‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺃ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )ﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [Paper Feed Switch‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬
‫)ﺝ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ]‪) [Cassette‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ( )ﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫)ﺝ(‬
‫)ﺩ(‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺺ ]‪/Plain Paper‬ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٦ × ٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ١٥٢٫٤ × ١٠١٫٦/‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٧ × ٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ١٧٧٫٨ × ١٢٧٫٠/‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٣٩ × ٢٫١٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٨٦٫٠ × ٥٤٫٠/‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ( ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ )ﺃ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﺃ(‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺏ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [HOME‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ٍ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ T‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ T‬ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ T‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Canon MP810‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫"‪ "Microsoft‬ﻭ"‪ "Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪ Corporation‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "Macintosh‬ﻭ"‪ "Mac‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Apple Computer, Inc.‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "Adobe‬ﻭ")‪ "Adobe RGB (1998‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Adobe Systems‬‬
‫‪ Incorporated‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "SmartMedia‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Toshiba Corporation‬‬
‫"‪ "MEMORY STICK‬ﻭ"‪ "Memory Stick PRO‬ﻭ"‪ "MEMORY STICK Duo‬ﻭ"‪"Memory Stick PRO Duo‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫"‪ "xD-Picture Card‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.‬‬
‫"‪ "MultiMediaCard‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.MultiMediaCard Association‬‬
‫"‪ "SD Secure Digital memory card‬ﻭ"‪ "miniSD Card‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD Association‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ‪ ٢٠٠٦‬ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪CANON INC.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪MP Drivers‬‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ ®‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪/Select Language‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪/Select Your Place of Residence‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ MP Drivers‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪/Easy Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪/Setup CD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫]‪/Custom Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ[‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪/User Registration‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ[ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫■‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫■‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ MP Drivers‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Windows 2000‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ]‪/Administrators‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻮﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )‪ ,Adobe® RGB (1998‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Custom Install‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ Adobe RGB (1998‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Windows Me‬ﻭ ‪.Windows 98‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ "ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪MP‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ّ‬
‫‪ "Drivers‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ،MP Drivers‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ]‪/Manual‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪/Setup CD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪MP Drivers‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫])‪ [(MP101‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ]‪) [Auto Sheet Feeder‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻳﻀﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ "LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫••‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫••‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Back‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫>‪.<Language selection‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻜﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﻻﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ]‪/MP810 On-screen Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ MP810‬ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ )ﺃﻭ ]‪/Programs‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫]‪ /Canon MP810 Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ /MP810 On-screen Manual] < [Canon MP810‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ MP810‬ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪Windows® HTML Help Viewer :‬‬
‫••‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Internet Explorer‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.Windows Update‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ]‪/MP810 On-screen Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ MP810‬ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ]‪/Manual‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ]‪/Setup CD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.top.htm‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪Help Viewer :‬‬
‫••‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Safari‬ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .HTML‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Safari‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Computer, Inc.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻂ )ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ]‪/Setup CD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﻻﺋﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪/Scanning Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ[‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪/Printer Driver Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪/Photo Application Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ[‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪/Setup CD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫]‪//Bluetooth User’s Guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪[Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫••‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﱠ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﻭﺃﺣﺴﺴﺖ ﺑﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴُﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻳﺪﺍﻙ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪WEEE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ،(2002/96/EC‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻤﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ )‪ .(EEE‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﺍً ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻧﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.www.canon-europe.com/environment‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﻟﻴﺨﺘﻨﺸﺘﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ )‪ (EWS‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.www.canon-europe.com‬‬
‫‪Canon Europa N.V., Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺮﻑ ‪B02954 :Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪Exif Print‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪.Exif Print‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Exif Print‬ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑًﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Exif Print‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮﻥ ‪“Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Industry‬‬
‫‪.Canada‬‬
‫‪Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux‬‬
‫‪appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur‬‬
‫‪NMB-003 d'Industrie Canada intitulée « Appareils numériques ».‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ®‪ENERGY STAR‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺼﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻳﻜﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ®‪ ،ENERGY STAR‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ENERGY STAR‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ®‪ ENERGY STAR‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎً ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎً ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻄﻮﻋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺳﺨﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٦٠ - ٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ )ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ‪ /‬ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﺶ ‪ (FINE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ "ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪K10289 (MP810) :‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪MP Drivers‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising